Pontiac 2005 Grand Am, 2005 Owner's manual

Pontiac 2005 Grand Am, 2005 Owner's manual
2005 Pontiac Grand Am Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-2
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts
.............................................. 1-9
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-30
Airbag System
......................................... 1-51
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-57
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-13
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-15
Mirrors .................................................... 2-28
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-29
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-30
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-19
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-22
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-37
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-35
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-42
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-45
Tires
...................................................... 5-46
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-71
Vehicle Identification
................................. 5-79
Electrical System ...................................... 5-80
Capacities and Specifications
..................... 5-85
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, PONTIAC,
the PONTIAC Emblem, and the name GRAND AM
are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Pontiac Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is
needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is
sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 22720031 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the
page number where it can be found.
©
2004 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-2
Manual Seats ................................................1-2
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ..............................1-3
Six-Way Power Driver Seat ..............................1-3
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-4
Head Restraints .............................................1-5
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-6
Easy Entry Seat .............................................1-6
Power Lift Seat ..............................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-8
Safety Belts .....................................................1-9
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone .................1-9
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-13
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-14
Driver Position ..............................................1-14
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-22
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-22
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-23
Center Rear Passenger Position .....................1-26
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-27
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-29
Child Restraints .............................................1-30
Older Children ..............................................1-30
Infants and Young Children ............................1-32
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-36
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-39
Top Strap ....................................................1-39
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-41
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-41
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ....................................1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ................................1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-46
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-48
Airbag System ...............................................1-51
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-52
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-54
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-54
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-55
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? .....1-55
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-56
Restraint System Check ..................................1-57
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-57
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ...................................................1-58
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release
the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Six-Way Power Driver Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power seat
control is located on
the outboard side of the
driver’s seat.
The driver’s seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To raise the seat, ratchet the lever upward until the seat
is at the desired height. To lower the seat, ratchet the
lever downward until the seat is at the desired height.
This control allows you to move the seat up, down,
forward, or backward. It will also move the front or rear
of the seat cushion up or down.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by pushing the
control toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
• Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by holding
the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by
holding the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by
holding the rear of the control up or down.
1-3
Reclining Seatbacks
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat and move the seatback
to where you want it. Release the lever to lock the
seatback. Pull up on the lever without pushing on the
seatback and the seatback will go to an upright position.
1-4
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of
the restraint is closest to the top of your head. This
position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-5
Seatback Latches
Easy Entry Seat
For two-door model vehicles, the front seatbacks fold
forward to let people get into the back seat. The
seatback latch is designed for one-handed operation.
For two-door model vehicles, the right front seat of your
vehicle makes it easy for people to get in and out of
the rear seat.
To fold a front seatback forward, lift the seatback
latch fully without pushing forward on the seatback to
unlock it. Then the seatback will fold forward.
1. Fold the right front seatback forward after lifting the
seatback latch fully.
Push the seatback to its original position, and the
seatback will lock.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-6
2. Slide the seat forward to allow someone to get into
the rear seat area.
3. Push the seatback upright to lock it and slide the
seat fully rearward to lock it.
4. Adjust the seat to the desired position.
5. The front passenger should try to move the seat to
make sure the seat is locked into place.
{CAUTION:
If the easy entry right front seat is not locked,
it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the
person sitting there could be injured. After you
have used it, be sure to push rearward on an
easy entry seat to be sure it is locked.
Power Lift Seat
If your vehicle has this feature, to move the power lift
seat forward or rearward, pull up on the lever located
under the front of the driver’s seat to unlock it. Slide the
seat to where you want it and release the lever. Try
to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat
is locked into place.
To raise or lower the power lift seat, hold the switch
located on the outboard side of the driver’s seat up
or down.
1-7
Rear Seats
{CAUTION:
Rear Seat Operation
Folding the Seatback
If your vehicle has this feature, do the following:
1. Pull the release straps
located in the trunk.
The right strap operates
the passenger’s side
rear split seat. The left
strap operates the
driver’s side rear
split seat.
2. Fold the seatback down from the inside of the
vehicle.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To raise the seatback, push the seatback up to return it
to its original position.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is latched
securely in the fully upright position.
1-8
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-25.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
1-9
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-10
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-11
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-12
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-13
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-30
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-32. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-14
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-29.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-15
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
To move it down, squeeze the release button and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can
move the adjuster up just by pushing on the shoulder
belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where
you want it, try to move it down without squeezing the
release button to make sure it has locked into position.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder.
1-21
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-14.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing. If
you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-22
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-23
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-29. Make sure the release
button on the buckle is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you
ever had to.
1-24
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-25
Center Rear Passenger Position
Lap Belt
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
When you sit in the center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the
belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-26
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-29.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the
safety belt:
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort
for children who have outgrown child restraints and
booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort guides
may be installed on the shoulder belts.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-27
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1-28
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-23.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and slide them between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the
loop of the elastic cord exposed.
1-29
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-30
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-27.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in the center seat position,
the one that has only a lap belt.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-31
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
1-32
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-33
CAUTION:
(Continued)
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
CAUTION:
1-34
(Continued)
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-35
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-36
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
1-37
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-38
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger
seat. Here is why:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-39
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
Strap Anchor Location on page 1-41. Be sure to use
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
1-40
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for
the rear seating positions. You will find them behind
the rear seat on the filler panel.
Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the
right front passenger’s position if a national or local law
requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored. There is no place
to anchor the top strap in this position.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors in the rear outside seat positions.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
1-41
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-42
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating the
lower anchors for this child
restraint system, each
seating position with the
LATCH system has a label
on the seatback at each
lower anchor position.
The labels are located near the base of the rear outside
seat positions.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-41.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-39.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-43
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-41. See Top Strap
on page 1-39 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-44
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using a forward-facing
child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-45
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-41. See Top Strap
on page 1-39 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-46
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-41.
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-39 if the child
restraint has one.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
1-48
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-49
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-50
Airbag System
CAUTION:
Your vehicle has airbags — one airbag for the driver
and another airbag for the right front passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating airbag. But these
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job
and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
(Continued)
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or
in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them.
Airbags are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
CAUTION:
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could seriously injure you.
Safety belts help keep you in position before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
1-51
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-25.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
on page 1-30 and Infants and Young Children on
page 1-32.
Where Are the Airbags?
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel, which
shows AIR BAG.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-52
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
1-53
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not
move or deform, the threshold level is about 9 to 14 mph
(14 to 23 km/h). (The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be
somewhat above or below this range.)
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For
example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a
different crash speed than if the object does not
deform.
1-54
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. Inflation is determined by the angle of the
impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal
and near-frontal impacts.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. The
sensing system triggers a release of gas from the
inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But airbags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and many side impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward those
airbags. Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do
so. If you have breathing problems but can not
get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or a
door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the airbag inflated.
Some components of the airbag module — the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s airbag or the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s bag — will be hot for a
short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-55
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for your
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders on page 7-9.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer for
service.
1-56
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, the bag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
airbag module in the steering wheel or both the
airbag module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag. Do not open or break
the airbag coverings.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You don’t want the system to inflate
while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Restraint System Check
{CAUTION:
Checking Your Restraint Systems
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped
with yellow tape or yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure
to follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-57
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint systems
are working properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary replacements
made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If your seat adjuster will not work after a crash, the
special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat
to the adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part about the airbag system
earlier in this manual.
1-58
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-4
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Delayed Locking .............................................2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-10
Lockout Protection ........................................2-11
Trunk ..........................................................2-11
Windows ........................................................2-13
Power Windows ............................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-15
Passlock® ....................................................2-15
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-15
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-15
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-16
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-17
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-17
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-19
Automatic Transaxle Operation .......................2-20
Parking Brake ..............................................2-23
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-24
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-25
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-26
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-26
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....2-27
Mirrors ...........................................................2-28
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-28
Outside Remote Control Mirror .......................2-28
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-28
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-29
Storage Areas ................................................2-29
Glove Box ...................................................2-29
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-29
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-30
Sunroof .........................................................2-30
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
One key is used for the
ignition and all locks.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When a new vehicle is delivered to the dealer, the key
has a key tag. This tag has a bar-coded key code
that tells your dealer how to make extra keys. This tag
may be removed and kept by your dealer. If it hasn’t
been removed, keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose
your key, your dealer can easily make another one
by using the key code. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-5 for more information.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-3
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up
to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry
transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
The following functions are available with the keyless
entry system:
Q (Lock):
Press this
button to lock all doors. The
interior lamps will turn off
after all of the doors are
closed. If all of the doors are
closed, the parking lamps
will flash twice and the horn
will chirp to indicate locking
has occurred.
W (Unlock):
Press this button once to unlock the
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again within five
seconds, all remaining doors will unlock. The interior
lamps will stay on for 10 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on. The parking lamps will flash twice to
indicate unlocking has occurred.
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press this button to
open the trunk, if the trunk lockout is not engaged. You
can open the trunk with the transmitter when the
vehicle speed is less than 2 mph (3 km/h), when the
parking brake is engaged, or when the ignition is off. The
interior lamps will come on for 10 seconds or until the
ignition switch is turned to ON.
L (Remote Alarm): Press this button to make the
horn sound and the headlamps and the parking lamps
flash for up to two minutes. The interior lamps will
come on and remain on while the horn is sounding and
the lamps are flashing. Turn off the horn and lamps
by pressing the remote alarm button again or by turning
the ignition to ON.
Programmable Horn Chirp
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
lock the doors or use the delayed locking feature
the parking lamps will flash and the horn will chirp.
Disable the programmable horn chirp by pressing and
holding either of the door lock switches in the unlock
position for 10 seconds with the ignition ON and all of
the doors closed. When you hear the horn chirp,
programming is complete.
Reactivate the horn chirp feature by repeating the
above procedure.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
2-5
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the remote keyless entry
transmitter do the following:
1. Use a flat object like a coin to separate the bottom
half from the top half of the transmitter.
2. Remove the battery and replace it with the new
one. Make sure the positive side of the battery
faces up. Use one three-volt, CR2032, or
equivalent, type battery.
3. Put the two halves back together. Make sure the
cover is on tightly, so water won’t get in.
2-6
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or remote keyless
entry system. You can only use your key to unlock the
driver’s side door.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
From the inside, you can lock or unlock the door by
pushing the manual lever forward or rearward.
2-7
Power Door Locks
With the power door locks, you can lock or unlock all of
the doors on your vehicle using the driver’s or front
passenger’s door lock switch.
Press the bottom of the switch to lock all of the doors.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all of the doors.
Delayed Locking
This feature will allow the driver to delay the actual
locking of the vehicle. This feature will not operate if the
key is left in the ignition. See Lockout Protection on
page 2-11.
With the key out of the ignition and the driver’s door
open, pressing LOCK on the driver’s power door
lock switch will not immediately lock the other doors.
Instead a seven second delay will start and three chimes
will be heard. Seven seconds after the driver’s door
has been closed, all of the doors will lock and the
parking lamps will flash. The horn will also chirp if the
horn chirp feature is enabled. See “Programmable Horn
Chirp” previously for more information.
2-8
If the driver opens another door before the seven
seconds, the doors will not lock until seven seconds
after the last door is closed.
Press LOCK twice on the power door lock switch on the
driver’s door to lock the doors without a delay or
press the LOCK button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter while all doors are closed.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Programmable automatic power door locks are intended
to provide enhanced security and convenience by
automatically locking and unlocking doors. This feature
lets you program your power door locks to one of
four modes.
Customizing the Automatic Door Locks
• Mode 1: All doors automatically lock when the
transaxle is shifted out of PARK (P). The doors will
remain locked unless manually unlocked or the
lock button is pressed. All doors will unlock when
the transaxle is shifted into PARK (P) and the
ignition is turned to OFF.
• Mode 2: All doors automatically lock when the
transaxle is shifted out of PARK (P). Only the
driver’s door will unlock when the transaxle is shifted
into PARK (P) and the ignition is turned to OFF.
• Mode 3: All doors automatically lock when the
transaxle is shifted out of PARK (P). No automatic
door unlock.
• Mode 4: No automatic door lock or unlock.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory it was
programmed in Mode 1. To determine the current
mode or to change to a different mode, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) and turn the
ignition to ON.
2. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock
switch for 10 seconds. Release the switch when
you hear the chime.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is in.
You can change the mode by pressing and
holding LOCK on the power door lock switch
(two chimes for Mode 2, three chimes for Mode 3
and four chimes for Mode 4).
4. Repeat Step 2 until you hear the number of chimes
that matches the mode you want.
The mode you selected is now set.
2-9
Rear Door Security Locks
If your vehicle is a four-door model, it has rear door
security locks that help prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the inside.
The switch is located on the
inside of each rear door.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open a rear door when the security lock is on, do
the following:
1. Unlock the door from the inside.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or
older children who ride in the rear won’t be able to open
the rear door from the inside. You should let adults
and older children know how these security locks work,
and how to cancel the locks.
To cancel a rear door lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door from the inside and open it from
the outside.
2. Move the switch down.
3. Do the same to the other rear door.
To use the security locks, do the following to each
rear door:
1. Move the switch up.
2. Close the door.
2-10
The rear doors will now work normally.
Lockout Protection
Lockout protection is a standard feature intended to
provide enhanced security and convenience. This
feature prevents a driver who has left the keys in the
ignition from locking the doors or using the power door
locks while any door is open.
To override this feature, when the key is in the ignition
and a door is open, hold the power door lock switch
for three seconds.
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of your vehicle. If you don’t leave the keys in
the ignition, or if you use the manual door lock, or if you
use the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped),
you could still lock your keys inside your vehicle. Always
remember to take your keys with you.
Trunk
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the key and
turn the trunk lock cylinder or use the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-26.
When closing the trunk, push the trunk lid in the center
to ensure that the lock fully latches.
2-11
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Press the remote trunk release button, located on the
driver’s door, to release the trunk lid. The remote
trunk release will only work when either the ignition is
off, the parking brake is engaged or the vehicle speed is
less than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located inside the trunk on the trunk latch. This
handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the
release handle up to open the trunk from the inside.
2-12
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-13
Power Windows
Window Lock Out
On four-door models, the driver’s power window
controls also include a window lock out. When the
lock-out switch is moved to the left (with the red
showing), the driver and passengers will be able to use
their window switches. Move the lock-out switch to
the right to stop the passengers from using their window
switches. The driver can still control all the windows
with the lock on.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors and
slide them along the rod to cover different areas of
the front window. You can also swing them to cover the
side windows.
The window switches are located on the armrest on the
driver’s door. In addition, each passenger door has a
window switch.
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window switch has an express-down feature.
Pull the top of the switch partway, and the driver’s window
will open a small amount. If the switch is pulled all the
way, the window will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, push the switch
forward. To raise the window, push and hold the
switch forward.
2-14
Visor Vanity Mirror
Swing down the driver’s side sun visor and lift the cover
to expose the vanity mirror.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
Passlock®
®
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
®
During normal operation, the SECURITY light will turn
off approximately five seconds after the ignition key
is turned to ON and the engine is started.
After attempting to start the engine, if the SECURITY
light flashes or stays on, wait ten minutes with the key in
ON until the light goes off. Then turn the ignition to
OFF before attempting to start the engine again.
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-38 for more information.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5 for
more information.
2-15
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
B (ACCESSORY): This position unlocks the transaxle.
It also lets you use things like the radio and windshield
wipers when the engine is not running. To use
ACCESSORY, turn the key clockwise to the first
position. Use this position if your vehicle must be pushed
or towed, but never try to push-start your vehicle.
C (ON): This position is where the key returns to after
you start your engine and release the key. The
ignition switch stays in ON when the engine is running.
But even when the engine is not running, you can
use ON to operate your electrical accessories and to
display some instrument panel warning lights.
A (OFF): This is the only position from which you can
remove the key. The shift lever must be in PARK (P)
with the ignition in OFF to remove the key.
A warning chime will sound if you open the driver’s door
when the ignition is off and the key is in the ignition.
2-16
D (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON for normal driving.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow the radio to
continue to work up to 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned to OFF.
Your radio will work when the ignition key is in ON or
ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON to OFF,
the radio will continue to work for up to 10 minutes or
until any door is opened.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
Starting Your 2.2L L4 ECOTEC™
Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition key to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When your engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
“race” your engine when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
2-17
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Starting Your 3400 V6 Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine warms up.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2-18
2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way down
while you turn the key to START. Do this until the
engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of the key.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still will not start or starts briefly but then stops
again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on
temperature. When the engine starts, release the
key and the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have this feature. In very cold weather,
0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can
provide easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should be
plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the
coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle may also
have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord.
This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. On
the 2.2L L4 ECOTEC™ engine, the engine coolant
heater cord is located in front of the coolant
surge tank on the passenger’s side of the engine
compartment. On the 3400 V6 engine, the
engine coolant heater cord is located near the
engine air cleaner/filter. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on
location.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
2-19
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle
has a shift lever located on
the console between the
seats.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
2-20
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 2-24. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to apply your regular
brake and press the shift lever button before you can
shift from PARK (P) while the ignition key is in ON. If you
cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the
shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
Park (P) on page 2-25 later in this section.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-29.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine racing may damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not racing when shifting
your vehicle.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
2-21
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you
could damage the transaxle. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds
until then.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some
times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
• When going down a steep hill.
2-22
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on.
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake handle up until you can
press the release button. Hold the release button in as
you move the brake handle all the way down.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.
To set the parking brake, pull up on the parking brake
handle. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-27.
2-23
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-38.
To shift into PARK (P), do the following:
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
2-24
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
automatic transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.” To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To
find out how, see “Shifting Into Park (P)” previously in the
section.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK when
the ignition is in OFF. In addition, you have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON. See Automatic
Transaxle Operation on page 2-20.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you hold the brake pedal down but still cannot shift
out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY. There is no
shift interlock in this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-25
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see
or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and
death.
{CAUTION:
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-26
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-26.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-24.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 4-38.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
Winter Driving on page 4-25.
2-27
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted two ways. First, to adjust
the height of the mirror, adjust the arm that connects the
mirror to the windshield. Second, adjust the angle of
the mirror, by moving the mirror to a position that allows
you to see out of the back window.
Outside Power Mirrors
The selector knob, located
on the driver’s side door,
controls both outside
rearview mirrors.
To reduce glare from headlamps behind you, move the
lever toward you to the night position. To return the mirror
to the daytime position, move the lever away from you.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
The outside rearview mirror should be adjusted so you
can see a little of the side of your vehicle when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Adjust the driver’s outside mirror with the control lever
on the driver’s door.
To adjust your passenger’s mirror, sit in the driver’s seat
and have a passenger adjust the mirror for you.
Move the selector knob to the left or right to choose
either the driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror. Move
the knob to adjust each outside mirror in the desired
direction. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen while
sitting in a comfortable driving position. Keep the
selector switch in the center position when not adjusting
either outside mirror.
Both mirrors can be manually folded inward by pulling
them toward the vehicle. This feature may be useful
when going through a car wash or confined space. Push
the mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normal
position, before driving.
2-28
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove
box has a light inside.
Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders in the front of the vehicle near
the center console and two in the rear of the vehicle.
Pull down the door on the rear of the center console to
use the rear seat cupholders.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
2-29
Center Console Storage Area
The center console has a separate storage area. To
open the compartment, which is also the armrest, pull up
on the front of the lid.
In both the vent and fully open positions, the air flow
can be adjusted for driving comfort by pushing and
holding the switch forward until the sunroof moves to
the desired position.
Sunroof
To close the sunroof, push the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released during operation. Close the
sunshade by hand.
If your vehicle has this feature, the switch is located on
the headliner between the sun visors. The sunroof
will only operate while the ignition is in ON.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
your vehicle has an electrical failure.
The sunroof can be opened to a vent position or it can
be express-opened all of the way.
To open the sunroof to the vent position, you must first
open the sunshade by hand. Then push the switch
back and release it.
To fully open the sunroof, push the switch back again
and release it.
2-30
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel, damage will occur and the
sunroof may not open or close properly. Always
close the glass panel before closing the sunshade.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-7
Horn .............................................................3-7
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-8
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Washer .........................................3-9
Windshield Wiper Lever .................................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Headlamps ..................................................3-14
Headlamps Off in PARK (P) ...........................3-14
Delayed Headlamps ......................................3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-16
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17
Dome Lamp .................................................3-17
Entry/Exit Lighting .........................................3-17
Trunk Lamp .................................................3-18
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-18
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-18
Climate Controls ............................................3-19
Climate Control System .................................3-19
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-22
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-22
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-24
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-24
Tachometer .................................................3-24
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-25
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-25
Charging System Light ..................................3-26
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-27
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-28
Enhanced Traction System Warning Light .........3-28
Enhanced Traction System Active Light ............3-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-29
Low Coolant Warning Light ............................3-30
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-30
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-34
Change Engine Oil Light ................................3-34
Security Light ...............................................3-35
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-35
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light .....................3-35
Service Vehicle Soon Light ............................3-35
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-36
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Audio System(s) .............................................3-37
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-37
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) .........................................3-37
Radio with CD (Base Level) ...........................3-38
Radio with CD (Up Level) ..............................3-42
Radio with CD (MP3) ....................................3-53
3-2
Theft-Deterrent Feature ..................................3-67
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .......................3-68
Radio Reception ...........................................3-69
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-69
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-69
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-70
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-70
Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-70
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Fog Lamp Button. See Fog Lamps on page 3-16.
B. Instrument Panel Brightness Thumbwheel. See
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-17.
C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-8.
D. Horn. See Horn on page 3-7.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-22.
F. Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever. See Windshield
Wiper Lever on page 3-10.
G. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on page 2-16.
H. Enhanced Traction System Button (If Equipped).
See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-8.
I. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-6.
J. Instrument Panel Fuse Blocks. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-80.
K. Hood Release Handle. See Hood Release on
page 5-10.
L. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-7.
M. Audio System Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).
See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-68.
N. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control on
page 3-11.
O. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on
page 2-20.
P. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtrays and
Cigarette Lighter on page 3-18.
Q. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-19.
R. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-37.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flasher is located near the center of
the instrument panel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
3-6
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbol on
your steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit and enter
your vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and pull the lever
toward you. Then move the wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
3-7
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
•
•
•
•
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Exterior Lamps Control
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and then check the
fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-80.
3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Washer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
To wash your windshield, press the button at the end of
the lever until the washers begin.
When the high beams are
on, a light on the
instrument panel cluster
also will be on if the
ignition is in ON.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you release the button, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three times
or will resume the speed you were using before.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
3-9
Windshield Wiper Lever
INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to INT to choose a
delayed wiping cycle. Turn the INT ADJ band down
for a longer delay or up for a shorter delay. The further
the INT ADJ band is turned upward, the shorter the
delay will be and the further the INT ADJ band is turned
downward, the longer the delay will be. The wiper
speed can only be adjusted when the lever is in the INT
position. Use this position for light rain or snow.
LO (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the first setting
past INT, for steady wiping at low speed.
HI (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second
setting past INT, for steady wiping at high speed.
Use this lever located on the right side of the steering
wheel to operate the windshield wipers.
OFF: Move the lever to OFF to turn off the windshield
wipers.
MIST: Move the lever all the way down to MIST for a
single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the windshield
wipers start; then let go. The windshield wipers will stop
after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the
band on mist longer.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades
do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-10
Cruise Control
• the parking brake is applied, or
• the brake system warning light is on.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
The cruise control buttons are located on the bottom of
the steering wheel.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).
The cruise control will turn off if any of the following
occur:
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
Your vehicle may have Enhanced Traction
System (ETS). See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
on page 4-8. If your vehicle is in cruise control while the
ETS begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise
control back on.
• The brakes are applied,
• the automatic transaxle is shifted to NEUTRAL (N),
3-11
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Press the cruise ON OFF button.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the SET COAST button and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset
it. Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can press the cruise control RESUME ACCEL
(Resume/Accelerate) button briefly.
3-12
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay
there.
If you press the RESUME ACCEL button longer, the
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the button
or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
don’t hold down the RESUME ACCEL button.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the SET COAST button, then release
the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll now
cruise at the higher speed.
• Press the RESUME ACCEL button. Hold it there until
you get up to the speed you want, and then release
the button. To increase your speed in very small
amounts, press the RESUME ACCEL button briefly
and then release it. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
The accelerate feature will only work after you turn on
the cruise control by pressing the SET COAST button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
• Press the SET COAST button until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET COAST button briefly. Each time you do
this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are four ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the cruise control RESUME ACCEL button
and the SET COAST buttons at the same time.
• Press the cruise ON OFF button.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
Headlamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
3 (Headlamps): Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
AUTO: Turning the control to this position turns the
headlamps, taillamps and parking lamps on and
off automatically, while the ignition is on, by sensing
how dark it is outside. For more information see
“Automatic Headlamp System” later in this section.
Headlamps Off in PARK (P)
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
O(Exterior Lamps):
Turn the outside part of the
lever with the symbol on it, to operate the lamps.
The exterior lamp control has three positions:
< (Parking Lamps):
Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with the
following.
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
3-14
To turn the headlamps off when it is dark outside, turn
the exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.
In this position, the parking lamps, sidemarker lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps and instrument panel
lights will be on, but the headlamps will be off.
To turn on the headlamps along with the other lamps
when it is dark outside, turn the exterior lamps control to
the AUTO or headlamp position.
Delayed Headlamps
The delayed headlamps feature will continue to
illuminate the headlamps for 20 seconds after the key is
turned to OFF, then the headlamps will automatically
turn off.
To override the 20 second delayed headlamp feature
while it is active turn the turn signal/multifunction
lever up one position and then back to AUTO.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will make your low-beam headlamps
come on at a reduced brightness when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on,
• the exterior lamps control is in AUTO or the parking
lamps only position,
• the light sensor detects daytime light,
• the parking brake is released, and
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps and instrument panel lights
will not be illuminated unless you have turned the
exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor on the
top of the instrument panel under the defroster grill, so
be sure it is not covered which will cause the
automatic headlamp system to be on whenever the
ignition is on.
The automatic headlamp system may also be on when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the DRL and the automatic
headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or
bright overhead street lights does not affect the system.
3-15
The DRL and automatic headlamp systems will only be
affected when the light sensor sees a change in
lighting lasting longer than this delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See “Instrument
Panel Brightness Control” under Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 3-17.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is off.
Then start the vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamps when you need them.
3-16
Fog Lamps
The button to turn your fog
lamps on and off is located
on the instrument panel,
to the left of the steering
wheel, beside the
instrument panel
brightness thumbwheel.
When using the fog lamps, the ignition must be on as
well as the parking lamps or the low-beam headlamps.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on and off.
An indicator light on the button will glow while the fog
lamps are on. The fog lamps will turn off while the
high-beam headlamps are turned on.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp
The switch on this lamp has three positions. The ON
position will turn on the light. The DOOR position
will turn on the light whenever a door is opened or when
the instrument panel brightness thumbwheel is moved
up. The OFF position will shut off the lamp completely,
even when a door is opened. If your vehicle is
equipped with a sunroof, the dome lamp also has
reading lamps for the rear seat passengers. Press the
left switch for the left reading lamp and the right
switch for the right reading lamp.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The thumbwheel for this feature is located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
Move the thumbwheel right to brighten the lights and left
to dim them.
The lamps inside your vehicle will go on when you open
any door. These lamps will fade out after about
10 seconds after all of the doors have been closed or
when the ignition is turned to ON. These lamps will also
go on when you press the trunk release, unlock
symbol button or the horn symbol on the keyless entry
system transmitter.
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
10 seconds after your key is removed from the ignition
to provide an illuminated exit.
3-17
Trunk Lamp
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
The trunk lamp comes on when you open your trunk.
To use the lighter, if equipped, push it in all the way and
let go.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
Your vehicle has a battery run-down feature designed to
protect your vehicle’s battery.
When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps, dome
lamp or glove box) is left on when the ignition is turned
off, the battery run-down protection system will
automatically shut the lamp off after 20 minutes. This
will avoid draining the battery.
To reactivate the interior lamps, do one of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Lift the driver’s door handle,
open any door or
press any remote keyless entry transmitter button,
press the power door lock switch,
press the remote trunk release or
turn the lamp that was left on to off and then to on
again.
3-18
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating.
Climate Controls
H (Vent):
Climate Control System
) (Bi-Level):
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, then directs most of the
remaining air to the floor outlets with some air directed
at the side windows.
A (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the side windows.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost modes. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
9 (Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Operation
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H MAX:
This mode is used for maximum cooling. It
will recirculate much of the air inside your vehicle.
It maximizes your air conditioner’s performance and your
vehicle’s fuel economy. The air-conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this mode when it is needed
to help dry the air in the vehicle.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to manually increase or decrease
the temperature inside your vehicle.
When it’s cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower, use the
engine coolant heater, if equipped, to provide warmer air
faster to your vehicle. An engine coolant heater warms
the coolant that the engine uses to provide heat to
warm the inside of your vehicle. For more information,
see Engine Coolant Heater on page 2-19.
3-19
A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is pressed,
an indicator light above the button will come on to let you
know that air conditioning is activated. The fan knob must
be set to a speed for the air conditioning to operate.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the highest fan speed.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the recirculation mode.
5. Select the coolest temperature.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn the recirculation mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
3-20
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to choose from to
clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to select defog or defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs half of the air to the
windshield with most of the remaining air directed to the
floor outlets and some air directed at the side windows.
When you select this mode, the system turns off
recirculation automatically and runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or
below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode.
1 FRONT (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air
to the windshield, with some air directed to the floor
outlets. In this mode, the system will automatically turn off
recirculation and run the air-conditioning compressor,
unless the outside temperature is at or below freezing.
Recirculation cannot be selected while in the defrost
mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window.
Use the louvers on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
< REAR:
Operation Tips
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light above the
button will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated. Be sure to clear as much snow
from the rear window as possible.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
• When an objectionable odor outside the vehicle is
encountered, use the MAX mode, with the
temperature knob at a comfortable setting to
prevent the odor from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system. This can be helpful when
driving through a long tunnel with poor ventilation.
However, extended usage of this mode in cold
or cool weather can cause window fogging.
3-21
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may
be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-22
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you
know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll
know how fast you’re going, how much fuel you have,
and many other things you’ll need to drive safely
and economically.
Your vehicle has this cluster or one very similar to it. It includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on
the following pages. Be sure to read about them.
United States Cluster shown, Canadian Cluster similar
3-23
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer. The
digital odometer will read 999,999 if someone tries to
turn it back.
Repair or replacement of your instrument panel cluster
should only be performed by a qualified GM service
center.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven
since you last reset it.
The reset button is located below the tachometer. To
reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold briefly the
ribbed side of the button while the trip odometer is
displayed. Also, by pressing this button for less than
one second you can toggle between the odometer and
the trip odometer.
3-24
The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows airbag. The system checks
the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on
page 1-51.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
United States
Canada
This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and
it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should
go out. This means the system is ready.
3-25
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-26
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on for a few
seconds when you turn on
the ignition as a check
to show you it is working.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving and you
hear a chime, you may have a problem with the
electrical charging system. It could indicate that you
have a loose generator drive belt or another electrical
problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while
this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States
Canada
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-35.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
3-27
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
If your vehicle has the
anti-lock brake system, the
light will come on when
your engine is started and
may stay on for several
seconds. That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the
light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays
on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning
light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
Brake System Warning Light on page 3-27.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-28
Enhanced Traction System Warning
Light
When the system is on
and the parking brake is
fully released, this warning
light will come on to let
you know if there’s a
problem.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the Enhanced
Traction System on. But you can turn the system off if
you prefer.
Enhanced Traction System Active
Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If your vehicle has the
Enhanced Traction System
(ETS), this light will
come on when the system
is limiting wheel spin.
Slippery road conditions may exist if the Enhanced
Traction System active light comes on, so adjust your
driving accordingly.
The light will stay on for a few seconds after the
Enhanced Traction System stops limiting wheel spin.
The Enhanced Traction System active light also comes
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON. If
the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
there to tell you when the system is active.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, the light comes
on and you hear a chime, your engine is too hot! It
means that your engine coolant has overheated. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-24.
3-29
Low Coolant Warning Light
This light comes on briefly
when you turn your
ignition on.
If this light comes on and stays on and you hear a
chime, the coolant level in your vehicle is low.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-22. If the light is on
along with an overheat warning, you may have a serious
overheating problem. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 3-29.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-24 for information
on what to do.
Your vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible.
3-30
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in the
United States or Check Engine Light in
Canada
United States
Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life
of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent
more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed
Avoiding hard accelerations
Avoiding steep uphill grades
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
3-31
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
3-32
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or check engine light is on or not
working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-33
Oil Pressure Light
If you have low engine oil
pressure, this light will stay
on after you start your
engine, or come on
and you will hear a chime
when you are driving.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
This light will come on briefly when you turn on
the ignition as a check to show you it is working. If it
does not come on with the ignition on, you may have a
problem with the bulb. Have it fixed right away.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
3-34
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Change Engine Oil Light
The CHANGE OIL light
should come on briefly as
a bulb check when you
start the engine. If the light
doesn’t come on, have it
serviced.
If the CHANGE OIL light comes on and stays on after
you start the engine, have the oil changed.
To reset the CHANGE OIL light, see Engine Oil on
page 5-15.
Security Light
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light will come on
when you turn the key to
ON and will stay on
until the vehicle starts.
If you’re driving and the security light comes on and
remains on, your Passlock® system is not working
properly. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® and
you should see your dealer.
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on
the ignition. It will also stay
on, or come on and a
chime will sound, if
the windshield washer fluid
reservoir is less than
one-third full.
Service Vehicle Soon Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
ignition to ON.
This light will illuminate
when the headlamp high
beams are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.
It will stay on, or come on and a chime will sound if it
detects a problem on the vehicle, such as a Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) or an automatic headlamp
system malfunction. If this happens, see your dealer as
soon as possible.
3-35
Fuel Gage
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when you turn a corner
or speed up.
United States
Canada
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left, when the ignition is on. When the indicator nears
empty, the light will come on and you will hear a chime.
You still have a little fuel left, but you should get
more soon.
3-36
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off the
ignition.
Audio System(s)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-17 for more
information.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold the HR or MIN arrow for two seconds.
Then press HR until the correct hour appears on
the display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. The time can be set with the
ignition on or off.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold HR or MIN for two seconds. Then press
and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the display.
AM will appear on the display for morning hours. Press
and hold MIN until the correct minute appears on the
display. The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold HR and MIN at the same time for two seconds until
UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on
the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.
3-37
Radio with CD (Base Level)
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, and AM. The display will show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
3-38
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK
arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations, with a strong
signal, that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
AUDIO: To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the AUDIO button until BAS or TRE appears on
the display. Then press and hold the up or the down
arrow to increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or
noisy, decrease the treble.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold the AUDIO button for
more than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and
a zero or T and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to the time of day. Then press and hold
the AUDIO button for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release the AUDIO
button until BAL appears on the display. Then press and
hold the up or the down arrow to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the AUDIO button until
FAD appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
3-39
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, first end out of audio mode
by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform
that function, or by waiting five seconds for the display
to return to the time of day. Then press and hold
the AUDIO button for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL (Calibration): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealer for service.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to the dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or cannot be corrected,
contact your dealer.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. CD
will appear on the display. If you want to insert a CD
with the ignition off, first press the eject button or
the RCL knob.
3-40
If you insert a CD with the radio off and the ignition on,
it will start to play
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if more than eight
seconds have played. The track number will appear on
the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
The track number will appear on the display. If this
pushbutton is held or pressed more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Release this pushbutton
to play the passage. The elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
5 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RND will
appear on the display. Press RDM again to turn off
random play. OFF will appear on the display.
6 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. RPT will appear on the display. The
current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT again to
turn off repeat play. OFF will appear on the display.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous track. The track number
will appear on the display. If either arrow is held
or pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see the current track
number or how long the current track has been
playing.
AM FM: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening to
the radio. CD will appear on the display if a CD is
loaded.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-41
CD Messages
Radio with CD (Up Level)
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
If your vehicle has the Monsoon audio system, included
are eight speakers and an eight channel amplifier.
MONSOON will appear on the display when the ignition
or the radio is turned on. See your dealer for details.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
3-42
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast to coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title and
artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, the
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise
at any speed. The volume level should always sound
the same to you as you drive. To turn SCV off, press this
button until OFF appears on the display.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, push this knob to display the time.
For RDS, push the RCL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-43
For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, push the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the
preset number appear on the display and you hear
a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset
station stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
w SCAN x:
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
Press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either arrow again to stop scanning.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-44
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID,
or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the tone control can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the
treble.
To return all of the tone controls to the middle position,
press and hold the TONE button until FLAT appears
on the display
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings.
Up to six customized equalization settings, can be
programmed, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the
EQ symbol will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the
EQ number.
5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT
knob to store the equalization setting and the
number. EQ SAVED will appear on the display and
you will hear a beep.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and
numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with
talk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press and release this button
until BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the speakers can
be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press and release this button until FADE
appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator
will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. Turn
the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button for
two seconds will return all speaker settings to the
middle position.
3-45
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the PROG TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. PTY will appear on the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the PTY and take you to
the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once.
If the PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK arrow
twice to display the PTY and then to go to another
station.
5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. PTY will appear on the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-46
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. PTY will appear on the display.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return, if program type select mode is
activated.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view the last message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
3-47
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and brackets will be displayed around TRAF. If no
station is found that broadcasts traffic announcements,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,
press the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use
the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and must be
returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-48
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-49
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in the vehicle may have previously been in
another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers cannot
be swapped between vehicles. If this message is received
after having your vehicle serviced, check with your GM
dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-50
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off, first
press the eject button or push the RCL knob. If
you insert a CD with the radio off and the ignition on, it
will start to play.
The CD symbol will appear on the display when a CD is
loaded. The track number will appear on the display,
as each new track starts to play.
If the ignition or the radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
the radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
\1 (Forward):
Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
xw 2:
This pushbutton is inoperable on this radio.
RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear
the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM
and the track number will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desired
customized equalization setting while playing a CD. The
equalization will be automatically set whenever you
play a CD. See “EQ” listed previously for more
information.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
3-51
w SEEK x:
Press the down arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
Press the up arrow to go to the next track. If either arrow
is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
w SCAN x:
Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN and the track number
appear on the display and you hear a beep. The CD will
go to the next track, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display, track and elapsed time, push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default. While elapsed time is showing,
CD TIME will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
3-52
Z (Eject):
Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off, if
this button is pressed first.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Radio with CD (MP3)
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Base Radio shown — Monsoon similar
If your vehicle has the Monsoon audio system, included
are eight speakers and an eight channel amplifier.
MONSOON will appear on the display when the radio or
the ignition is turned on. See your GM dealer for details.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48
contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast to coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title and
artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive
the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
3-53
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on
and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV, the
audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting allows
for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the
volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to
you as you drive. To turn SCV off, press this button until
OFF appears on the display.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is off, push this knob to display the time.
For RDS, push the RCL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-54
For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, push the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you
hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press either
SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until PSCAN and the
preset number appear on the display. You will hear
a double beep. The radio will go to the first preset
station stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
TONE: Press and release this button until BASS, MID,
or TREB appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the tone control can be
adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to increase or to
decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the
treble.
To return all of the tone controls to the middle position,
press and hold the TONE button until FLAT appears
on the display.
EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to select customized
equalization settings.
Up to six customized equalization settings can be
programmed, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to
create the equalization.
3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.
SELECT EQ # will appear on the display and the
EQ symbol will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the
EQ number.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-55
5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT
knob to store the equalization setting and the
number. EQ SAVED will appear on the display and
you will hear a beep.
6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settings and
numbers.
EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with
talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press and release this button
until BAL appears on the display. The SELECT LED
indicator will light to show that the speakers can
be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
FADE: To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press and release this button until FADE
appears on the display. The SELECT LED indicator
will light to show that the speakers can be adjusted. Turn
the SELECT knob to move the sound toward the front
or the rear speakers.
To return all of the speaker settings to the middle
position, press and hold the BAL FADE button for
two seconds.
3-56
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type
select mode. The PTY symbol will appear on
the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK
arrow to select the PTY and take you to the
PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow once.
If the PTY is not displayed, press either SEEK arrow
twice to display the PTY and then to go to another
station.
5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program type
select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display, go
back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
w SCAN x: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stations with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program type select
mode. The PTY symbol will appear on the display.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that
was set will return, if program type select mode is
activated.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
3-57
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can
view the last message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
3-58
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a station
that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking and
brackets will be displayed around TRAF. If no station is
found that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO
TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, press
the TRAF button to remove the brackets or use the TUNE
knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a station that supports
traffic announcements. If no station is found that
broadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC will
appear on the display.
The radio will play the traffic announcement if the volume
is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if the last
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and the
brackets are displayed.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and must be
returned to your GM dealer for service.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is
moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-59
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-60
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the EJECT button or push the RCL knob. If you
insert a CD with the radio off and the ignition on, it
will start to play.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or the
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
READING DISC and the CD symbol will appear on the
display, when a CD is loaded. The track number will
appear on the display, as each new track starts to play.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
\1 (Forward):
Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
RDM 2 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
3 # (Next Folder): This button does not have a
function for non-MP3 CDs.
4 s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
6 ! (Previous Folder): This button does not have a
function for non-MP3 CDs.
3-61
EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the customized
equalization setting while playing a CD. The equalization
will be automatically set whenever a CD is played.
See “EQ” listed previously for more information.
w SEEK x:
Press the up arrow to go to the start of
the next track. Press the down arrow to go to the
start of the previous track. Pressing either arrow for
more than 2 seconds will search the previous or
next tracks at two tracks per second. Release the button
to stop searching and to play the track.
w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow for more
than two seconds until SCAN and the track number
appear on the display and you hear a beep. The CD will
go to the next track, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either arrow again to
stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display, track and elapsed time, push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default. While elapsed time is showing,
CD TIME will appear on the display.
3-62
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded
on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be recorded
with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kpbs, 40 kpbs,
56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs, 128 kpbs,
160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs and 320 kpbs or
a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album will
be available when recorded using ID3 tags versions 1
and 2.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. Long
file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a large
number of files and folders or playlists may cause the
player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish to play
large numbers of files, folders, playlists, or sessions
minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist name.
You can also play an MP3 CD that was recorded using no
file folders. The system can support up to 11 folders in
depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum
in order to keep down the complexity and confusion in
trying to locate a particular folder during playback. If a
CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files will
be located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions will have no function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the
name of the folder the radio will display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
3-63
Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have been
played, play will continue from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, play will begin again at the first track of
the first folder or root directory.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See RCL later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
3-64
Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages will
be shortened. The display will not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename will not be displayed.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing a MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD will begin to play after the
player has read the table of contents and the file
structure and determined where the first playable track
is located. READING DISC will appear on the display.
After the MP3 has been read, the number of folders and
tracks will appear on the display, then the radio will
go back to the default display. The CD symbol will
appear on the display. If you want to insert an MP3 with
the ignition off, first press the EJECT button or push
the RCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio off and
the ignition on, it will start to play.
If the ignition or the radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
the radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The track number will appear on the display, as each
new track starts to play.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught in
the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
\1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 20 times the
normal playing speed. Release the pushbutton to play the
passage. FWD and the elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
RDM 2 (Random): To repeat the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FOLDER RANDOM will appear on the display. Once all
of the tracks in the current folder or playlist have
been played the system will move on to the next folder
or playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
To repeat the tracks on the CD, press and hold
this pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep
and DISC RANDOM will appear on the display. This
feature will not work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play. NO RANDOM will appear on the display.
3 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go
to the first track in the next folder or playlist. If the disc
contains playlists, it will go through the playlist, then
the folders. Pressing this button while in folder random
mode will take you to the next folder and random
the tracks in that folder. This function will not work on a
CD that does not contain folders or playlists.
3-65
4 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the
normal playing speed. Release the pushbutton to play
the passage. REV and the elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display. If this button is pressed for
more than 20 seconds, the radio will stop reversing and
begin to play.
6 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the previous folder or playlist. If the disc
contains playlists, it will go through the playlist, then the
folders. Pressing this button while in folder random mode
will take you to the previous folder and random the tracks
in that folder. This function will not work on a CD that
does not contain folders or playlists.
w SEEK x:
Press the up arrow to go to the start of
the next track. Press the down arrow to go to the
start of the previous track. Pressing either arrow for
more than 2 seconds will search the previous or
next tracks at two tracks per second. Release the button
to stop searching and to play the track.
3-66
TUNE: Turn this knob to fast track reverse or advance
through tracks in all folders or playlists. The track
number and file name will appear on the display for
each track. Turn this knob while in random to fast track
reverse or advance the tracks in sequential order.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch between track
mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode. The
display will show only 13 characters, but there can be up
to 3 pages of text. If there are more than 13 characters in
the song, folder, or playlist name, pushing this knob
within 2 seconds will take you to the next page of text. If
there are no other pages to be shown, pushing this knob
within 2 seconds will take you to the next display mode.
• Track will display the current track number and the
ID3 tag song name.
• Folder/playlist will display the current folder or playlist
number and the folder/playlist name.
• Time of day will display the time of day and the ID3
tag song name.
To change the default on the display, push this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold this knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
INFO (Information): INFO will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may be
activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-67
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
PRESET: Press this button to play stations that are
programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. The radio
will only seek preset stations with a strong signal that
are in the selected band.
When an MP3 CD is playing, press this button to go to
the next folder.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
When a CD is playing, press this button to listen to the
radio. The inactive CD will remain safely inside the
radio for future listening.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
Q SEEK R:
Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to fast forward or reverse.
3-68
Q VOLUME R: Press the up or the down arrow to
increase or to decrease the volume.
PLAY: When listening to the radio, press this button to
play a CD.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again, or any other radio button, to turn the sound on.
Radio Reception
Care of Your CDs
AM
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
3-69
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Chime level adjustment is only available on RDS radios.
The radio is the vehicle’s chime producer. To change
the volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with
the ignition on and the radio power off. The chime
volume level will change from the normal level to loud,
and LOUD will appear on the radio display. To
change back to the default or normal setting, press and
hold pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change
from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear
on the radio display. Removing the radio and not
replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will
disable vehicle chimes.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
The performance of the XM system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
3-70
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-2
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-5
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-6
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .....................4-8
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12
Passing .......................................................4-13
Loss of Control .............................................4-14
Driving at Night ............................................4-16
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-17
City Driving ..................................................4-20
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-22
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-23
Winter Driving ..............................................4-25
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ........4-29
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-30
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-30
Towing ..........................................................4-35
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-35
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-35
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-38
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-9.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
4-2
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
4-3
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC limit
for all commercial drivers in the United States is
0.04 percent.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in
one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
4-4
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
Braking
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on
page 4-8.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
4-5
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you
do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a
lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
you start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-7
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
If you do not have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or feel
the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal. This will help
you retain steering control. If you do have anti-lock, it is
different. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on
page 4-6.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Braking in Emergencies
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially
useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When
this happens, the system reduces engine power and
may also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock, your
first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and hold
it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle cannot
respond to your steering. Momentum will carry it in
whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the very
thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
4-8
This light, located on the
instrument panel cluster,
will come on when
your Enhanced Traction
System is limiting
wheel spin. See Enhanced
Traction System Active
Light on page 3-29.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal. This light will also come on when the anti-lock
brake system is working.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the enhanced
traction system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-11.
When the system is on
and the parking brake is
fully released, this warning
light, located on the
instrument panel cluster,
will come on to let you
know if there’s a problem.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave the Enhanced
Traction System on. But you can turn the system off if
you prefer.
The Enhanced Traction System operates in all transaxle
shift lever positions. But the system can upshift the
transaxle only as high as the shift lever position you’ve
chosen, so you should use the lower gears only
when necessary. See Automatic Transaxle Operation on
page 2-20.
4-9
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
To turn the system on or off, press the ETS button on
the instrument panel.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
When you turn the system off, the Enhanced Traction
System warning light will come on and stay on. If
the Enhanced Traction System is limiting wheel spin
when you press the button to turn the system off,
the warning light will come on – but the system won’t
turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer
a current need to limit wheel spin.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
You can turn the system back on at any time by
pressing the button again. The Enhanced Traction
System warning light should go off.
4-10
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose
control.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) on page 4-8.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than
braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a
truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That is the time
for evasive action — steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
See Braking on page 4-5. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it is all right to pass,
providing the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you are following a larger vehicle. Also,
you will not have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder and
check the blind spot.
4-13
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away from you
than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next
vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can
ease a little to the right.
4-14
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System, remember:
It helps to avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do
not have the Enhanced Traction System, or if the system
is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember: It
helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid, where the wheels are
no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the brakes
to get the wheels rolling again. This restores steering
control. Push the brake pedal down steadily when
you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels are
rolling, you will have steering control.
4-15
Driving at Night
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-16
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and are
not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-17
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-18
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-46.
4-19
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-21.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
4-21
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
4-22
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear
possible.
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-24
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
Also see Tires on page 5-46.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-25
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have enhanced traction, it will improve your ability
to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even
though your vehicle has an enhanced traction system,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may
want to turn the enhanced traction system off, such as
when driving through deep snow and loose gravel,
to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 4-8.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you will
want to brake very gently, too. If you do have anti-lock,
see Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 4-6. This
system improves your vehicle’s stability when you make a
hard stop on a slippery road. Whether you have the
anti-lock braking system or not, you will want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
Without anti-lock brakes, if you feel your vehicle begin to
slide, let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal
down steadily to get the most traction you can.
4-26
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake so
hard that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide.
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach:
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or
an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead
of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid
sudden steering maneuvers.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-27
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-28
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all
the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and
repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel
as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out
of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 4-30.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-59.
4-29
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in
gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion
that may free your vehicle. If that does not get you
out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If
you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
Vehicle on page 4-35.
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
4-30
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-46
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached
below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle
capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-31
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-38 for important information on towing a
trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
4-32
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-33
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label, found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door, tells you the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 132 lbs (60 kg) in your trunk.
4-34
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing
{CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk or rear area of your
vehicle. In a trunk, put them as far forward
as you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly. If you have fold-down rear seats,
you will find four anchors on the back wall
of your trunk. You can use these anchors
to tie down lighter loads. They are not
strong enough for heavy things, however,
so put them as far forward as you can in
the trunk or rear area.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-5.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
4-35
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Dinghy Towing
To tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground,
follow these steps:
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-22.
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.
2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4-36
4. To prevent your battery from draining while the
vehicle is being towed, remove the following
fuses from the driver’s side instrument panel fuse
block: WIPER, PCM ACC and IPC/BFC ACC.
See “Instrument Panel Fuse Block ” under Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-80 for the location of
these fuses.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY.
6. Shift your transaxle to Neutral (N).
7. Release the parking brake.
Remember to reinstall the fuses once you reach your
destination. To reinstall a fuse do the following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
3. Put the fuse back in.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Never have your vehicle towed from
the rear.
4-37
Dolly Towing
To tow your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
a dolly, do the following:
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-38
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what
the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What
is more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
4-39
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to
the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
4-40
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10–15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label at the rear edge of the
driver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for
your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-26. Dirt and water can, too.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes?
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you will be able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly. And because you may have anti-lock
brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system.
If you do, both systems will not work well, or at all.
4-41
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
You will need more passing distance up ahead when you
are towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
4-42
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) yet. When parking uphill, turn your
wheels away from the curb. When parking downhill,
turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-43
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (do not overfill),
engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a
good idea to review this information before you start
your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating on
page 5-24.
4-44
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-5
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................5-9
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-10
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20
Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..............................5-21
Engine Coolant .............................................5-22
Engine Overheating .......................................5-24
Cooling System ............................................5-26
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-31
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-32
Brakes ........................................................5-33
Battery ........................................................5-36
Jump Starting ...............................................5-37
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-42
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-42
Headlamps ..................................................5-42
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ..............5-43
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-44
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............5-44
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-45
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-45
Tires ..............................................................5-46
Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-47
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-49
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-52
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-53
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-54
Buying New Tires .........................................5-55
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-56
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-57
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-57
Tire Chains ..................................................5-59
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-60
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-61
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-62
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire ................................................5-64
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-69
Compact Spare Tire ......................................5-70
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ............................................5-71
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-71
Vinyl ...........................................................5-73
Leather .......................................................5-73
Instrument Panel ..........................................5-73
Interior Plastic Components ............................5-73
Glass Surfaces .............................................5-73
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-74
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-74
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-74
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-75
Finish Care ..................................................5-75
Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-75
Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-76
Tires ...........................................................5-76
Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-77
5-2
Finish Damage .............................................5-77
Underbody Maintenance ................................5-77
Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-77
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-78
Vehicle Identification ......................................5-79
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................5-79
Service Parts Identification Label .....................5-79
Electrical System ............................................5-80
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-80
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-80
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-80
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-80
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..........................5-81
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ....................5-83
Capacities and Specifications ..........................5-85
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-14.
5-4
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87
or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may get a
heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use
a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A
little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive uphill is
considered normal. This does not indicate a problem
exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary. If you are
using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and hear heavy
knocking, your engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label), it
is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-30. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
5-5
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. General Motors
recommends that you buy gasolines that are advertised
to help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean. If your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, try a different brand of gasoline. Also, your GM
dealer has additives that will help correct and prevent
most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
5-6
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may be
affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If
this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
5-7
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the
cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank, and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-74.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-30.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-30.
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-10
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located under the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release lever toward the driver’s
side of the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop rod from its
retainer and put the hood prop into the slot in the
hood marked PROP ROD.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the
hood and return the prop to its retainer. Then let
the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.2L L4 ECOTEC™ engine, here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-26.
B. Ground. See Jump Starting on page 5-37.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-33.
F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-31.
G. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-83.
H. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
I. Battery. See Battery on page 5-36.
J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-32.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 3400 V6 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See Cooling System on
page 5-26.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-31.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 5-33.
F. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
G. Battery. See Battery on page 5-36.
H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-32.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, then you will need to add at least one
quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil
crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications
on page 5-85.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
5-16
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM
Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil
can result in engine damage not covered by your
warranty.
5-17
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-18
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE OIL light will come on. See Change Engine
Oil Light on page 3-34. Change your oil as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer has
GM-trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL light being turned on, reset the system.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset.
To reset the CHANGE OIL light, use the following
procedure:
Using the Accelerator Pedal
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal slowly
three times within five seconds.
The reset is complete when you hear the chimes
and the CHANGE OIL light goes out. However, if the
light stays on and no chime is heard, you will
need to repeat the reset procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a
service station or a local recycling center for help.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE OIL light comes back on when you start
your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not reset.
Repeat the procedure.
5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace at the first oil change after
50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
2.2L L4 ECOTEC™ engine shown, 3400 V6 engine
similar
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Remove the screws that hold the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
4. Put the cover back on tightly.
5-20
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a
leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible. You
may also have your fluid level checked by your dealer or
service center when you have your oil changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transaxle fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
5-21
Engine Coolant
What to Use
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-24.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
5-22
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, your engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. Your
engine could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by your warranty.
Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the hash
mark, or a little higher.
If the LOW COOLANT light
comes on and stays on, it
means you are low on
engine coolant.
2.2L L4 ECOTEC™ engine shown, 3400 V6 engine
similar
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
See Low Coolant Warning Light on page 3-30.
5-23
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool. If the surge tank is empty, a special fill
procedure is necessary. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-24 and “How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank” under Cooling System on page 5-26
for instructions.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage and a low
coolant warning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-29
and Low Coolant Warning Light on page 3-30.
5-24
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
An overheat warning, along with a low coolant light, can
indicate a serious problem. See Low Coolant Warning
Light on page 3-30.
If you get an engine overheat warning with no low
coolant light, but see or hear no steam, the problem may
not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-25
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at or above the hash mark on
the label. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure
cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
2.2L L4 Engine shown, 3400 V6 Engine similar
A. Coolant Surge Tank with Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-26
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: If you operate the engine without coolant
or fail to maintain the cooling system properly,
you could damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for
maintaining your cooling system. See Cooling
System on page 5-26 for more information.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the hash
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
Engine Coolant on page 5-22 for more information.
5-27
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-28
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about two or two and
one-half turns.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will
allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
5-29
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture, to
the hash mark on the label. Wait about five minutes,
then check to see if the level is below the hash mark.
If the level is below the hash mark, add additional
coolant to bring the level up to the hash mark.
Repeat this procedure until the level remains
constant at the hash mark for at least five minutes.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the hash mark, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the
hash mark.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer, if necessary.
5-30
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-31
Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low
washer fluid light that will
come on in the instrument
panel cluster when the
washer fluid is low.
See Low Washer Fluid Warning Light on page 3-35 for
more information.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-32
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-27.
5-33
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
Care on page 5-71.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and may have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
5-34
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have wear
indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected immediately.
Also, the rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. When you have the front brake pads
replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate or
heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust correctly.
If you drive in that way, then — very carefully — make a
few moderate brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1 600 km), so your brakes will adjust properly.
5-35
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved replacement parts. If you do not,
your brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings that are
wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front
and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The
braking performance you have come to expect
can change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for battery
location.
5-36
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-37 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3-67.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter. Turn off the radio and all lamps that are
not needed. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save the radio!
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
5-37
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-38
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-39
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-40
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-41
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-45.
To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
1. Lift up on the two retaining clips which secure the
headlamp assembly.
5-42
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb, do
the following:
1. Remove the headlamp assembly as described
previously. See Headlamps on page 5-42 for
more information.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull out
the bulb.
3. Unclip the bulb assembly from the wiring harness.
2. Lift and pull the headlamp assembly forward, out of
the mounting bracket.
3. Turn the bulb assembly retainer counterclockwise
one-sixth of a turn and pull out the bulb assembly.
4. Replace the bulb.
When replacing the bulb, be sure to properly align
the bulb with the locating feature in the assembly.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the lamp
assembly.
4. Unclip the bulb assembly from the wiring harness.
5. Replace the bulb.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall the bulb
assembly and headlamp assembly.
5-43
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace a center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL)
bulb, do the following:
1. Open the trunk lid. See Trunk on page 2-11 for
more information.
2. Locate the center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL)
on the inside of the trunk lid.
3. Remove the three screws to access the bulbs.
4. Pull the bulb out from the socket.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reverse the steps to reassemble the lamp
assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and
Stoplamps
3. Remove the four wing nuts to access the taillamp
assembly from inside the vehicle.
4. Remove the taillamp assembly.
5. Press the five tabs to release the plate from
the lamp.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 2-11 for more
information.
6. Pull the bulb out from the socket.
2. Pull back the trunk trim.
8. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
5-44
7. Install a new bulb.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-Up Lamps
Center High-Mounted Stoplamps
Headlamps
Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
Sidemarker Lamps
Stop/Taillamps
Turn Signal Lamps
Bulb Number
3156
912
9007
3157NA or 3157A
194NA
3157
3156
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more
information.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
For the proper type and size, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-85.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here’s how to remove
the wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
5-45
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-30.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
CAUTION:
5-46
(Continued)
(Continued)
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-52.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-56.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-47
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The
TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on page 5-70
and If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-60.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-48
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kiloPascal (kPa).
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its
width.
5-49
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-52.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
5-50
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-52 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-54.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-56.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
5-51
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Premature or irregular wear
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
Poor handling
When to Check
Reduced fuel economy
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding the
compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-70.
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
•
•
•
•
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Unusual wear
Poor handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
5-52
How to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated. Check the
tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold
means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check
for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for
New Tires on page 5-54 and Wheel Replacement on
page 5-57 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
5-53
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-85.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-61.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-54
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the tire and loading information label. For
more information about this label and its location on
your vehicle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-30.
{CAUTION:
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a
Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same TPC
Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give proper endurance,
handling, speed rating, load range, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your
tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC number
will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Tire on page 5-70.
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-55
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-56
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling
one way or the other, the alignment may need to
be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving
on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be
rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-57
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
5-58
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-61 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P225/50R16 size tires, don’t
use tire chains, there’s not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/50R16 size tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class
“S” type chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them
as tightly as possible with the ends securely
fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
5-59
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
5-60
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION:
(Continued)
5-61
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as a
guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.
1. Turn the center retainer
nut on the compact
spare tire cover
counterclockwise to
remove it.
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-62
2. Lift and remove the cover.
You will find the jacking instructions label on the
underside of the tire cover.
3. Turn the wing nut
counterclockwise and
remove it. Then lift
off the adapter
and remove the
compact spare tire.
See Compact Spare
Tire on page 5-70
for more information
about the compact
spare tire.
4. Remove the jack and wrench from the trunk. The
jack and wheel wrench are stored in a foam tray.
Remove the band around the jack.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and the
wrench (B).
5-63
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap that has
plastic wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic nut caps.
You may need to use the wheel wrench to loosen
them. Do not pry off wheel covers or center caps that
have plastic wheel nut caps.
If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcap without
plastic wheel nut caps, gently pry on the edge of the
plastic wheel trim to remove it from the wheel to find
the wheel nuts.
3. Use the wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Don’t
remove them yet.
2. Remove the wheel cover or center cap from the
wheel to find the wheel nuts.
5-64
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
4. Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch (A or B) in the vehicle’s frame
nearest the flat tire.
5. Put the compact spare tire near you.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-65
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the wrench clockwise.
Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so
there is enough room for the compact spare tire to
fit underneath the wheel well.
{CAUTION:
7. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
8. Remove the flat tire.
5-66
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
10. Install the compact spare tire.
11. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand or with the wrench until the wheel is held
against the hub.
5-67
{CAUTION:
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-85 for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-85 for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-68
13. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{CAUTION:
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover and wheel
nut caps in the trunk until you have the flat tire repaired
or replaced.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
To store a flat tire, do the following:
1. Put the flat tire in the compact spare tire
compartment.
2. Secure the tire with the adapter and wing nut.
3. Place the cover and the nut on top of the flat tire.
4. Store the jack and the wrench in the tool tray.
5-69
Refer to the following diagram to assist you in storing
the compact spare tire and tools.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure your
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is
made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or
replaced where you want. Of course, it’s best to replace
your spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your
spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you
need it again.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Nut
Cover
Wing Bolt
Adapter
E.
F.
G.
H.
Wrench
Jack
Tool Tray
Flat Tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire on
page 5-70.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the
rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other
wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire and
its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-70
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in a closed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
Here are some cleaning tips:
•
•
•
•
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,
clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
5-71
Most stains can be removed with club soda water. To
clean, use the following instructions:
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip
water.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to the
fabric.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine, and
blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water
and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking
soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
5-72
Vinyl
Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This
may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-78.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
5-73
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
5-74
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-78. Do
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
page 5-74.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-78.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-75
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-76
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-77
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
5-78
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery, and
convertible tops.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
Swirl Remover Polish
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
Foaming Tire Shine Low
protects in one step. No
Gloss
wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
Wash Wax Concentrate
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
Spot Lifter
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
Odor Eliminator
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on your spare tire cover. It is very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label,
you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-79
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-56.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
A circuit breaker in the fuse panel protects the power
windows. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until
the problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible links. This greatly reduces the chance of
damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: two
instrument panel fuse blocks and the engine
compartment fuse block.
There are four spare fuses located in the driver’s side
instrument panel end cap for your use.
5-80
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Driver’s Side
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and
features listed.
Fuses
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Circuit
Breakers
PWR SEAT
Fuses
A
B
C
D
Usage
Windshield Wiper Motor, Washer
Pump
Trunk Release Relay/Motor, Audio
Amplifier/RFA
Turn Signal Lamps
Power Mirrors
Relay
TRUN REL
DR UNLOCK
DR LOCK
DRIVER DR
UNLOCK
Usage
Air Bags
Body Computer (BFC)
Power Control Module (PCM)
Door Lock Motors
Cluster, Body Computer (BFC)
Stop Lamps
Hazard Lamps
HVAC Head, Cluster, Data Link
Connector
Usage
Power Seats
Usage
Trunk Relay
Door Unlock Relay
Door Lock Relay
Driver’s Door Unlock Relay
5-81
Passenger’s Side
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and
features listed.
Fuse
D
E
F
G
H
I
Usage
HVAC Blower Motor
Cruise Control
Fog Lamps
Interior Courtesy Lamps
Radio, XM™ Satellite Radio/DAB
Power Sunroof
Circuit Breaker Usage
PWR WNDW Power Windows
Relay
FOG LPS
Fuse
A
B
C
5-82
Usage
Interior Lamp Dimming
Steering Wheel Cruise Control
Switch Lamps
Steering Wheel Cruise Control
Switches
Usage
Fog Lamps
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuse
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and
features listed.
3
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, near the battery.
4
5
6
7
8
Fuse
1
2
Usage
Ignition Switch
Right Electrical Center-Fog Lamps,
Radio, Body Function Control
Module, Interior Lamps
Relays
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Usage
Left Electrical Center-Stop Lamps,
Hazard Lamps, Body Function
Control Module, Cluster, Climate
Control System
Anti-Lock Brakes
Left Electrical Center-Power Seats,
Power Mirrors, Door Locks, Trunk
Release, Audio Amplifier, Remote
Keyless Entry
Not Used
Ignition Switch
Cooling Fan #1
Usage
Rear Defog
Not Used
Starter (V6 only)
Cooling Fan #1
HVAC Blower (Climate Control)
Cooling Fan #2
Cooling Fan
Air Conditioning Compressor
Not Used
Fuel Pump
5-83
Relays
19
20
21
22
Usage
Automatic Headlamp System
Automatic Headlamp System
Horn
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Fuses
23–32
33
Usage
Spare Fuse Holder
Rear Defog
Accessory Power Outlets, Cigarette
Lighter
Generator
Not Used
Air Conditioning Compressor, Body
Function Control Module
Automatic Transaxle
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Ignition System
Back-Up Lamps, Brake Transaxle
Shift Interlock
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
5-84
Fuses
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Usage
Horn
PCM
Parking Lamps
Climate Control System, Air
Conditioning
Canister Vent Valve, Exhaust
Oxygen Sensors
Fuel Pump, Injectors
Not Used
Right Headlamp
Left Headlamp
Cooling Fan #2
HVAC Blower (Climate Control)
Crank (V6 only)
Cooling Fan #2 Ground
Fuse Puller for Mini Fuses
Not Used
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English with metric conversions.
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
English
Metric
1.35 lbs
0.61 kg
Automatic Transaxle
9.5 quarts
9.0 L
Cooling System
2.2L L4 ECOTEC™
3400 V6 Engine
8.6 quarts
13.6 quarts
8.2 L
12.9 L
Engine Oil with Filter
5.0 quarts
4.7 L
Fuel Tank
14.1 gallons
53.4 L
100 ft lb
140 Y
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
2.2L L4 ECOTEC™
F
Automatic
0.042 inch (1.06 mm)
3400 V6
E
Automatic
0.060 inch (1.52 mm)
5-85
✍ NOTES
5-86
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-8
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-8
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year .....................................6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-12
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-13
Maintenance Record .....................................6-14
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
6-3
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL light comes on, it means that
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system may not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL light appears, certain services,
checks and inspections are required. Required
services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL light comes on within 10 months since the
vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on 10 months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life
system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission Control
Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes †
and (k).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-46.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or
leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
An Emission Control Service.
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service only). See
footnote (h).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark
plug wires (V6 only). An Emission
Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or
every 5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service.
•
6-6
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect drum brake linings for wear or cracks.
Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel
cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches and trunk lid hinges and
latches. More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
6-7
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Engine Oil Level Check
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
6-8
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-22 for further details.
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-46 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire. If
it moves, tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 5-61.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-23 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench dealer for service.
6-9
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealer
for service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to OFF in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the shift
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-23 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill.
Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking
brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench
Engine Oil
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on
page 5-15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only
Engine Coolant water
DEX-COOL® Coolant. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-22.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen Washer Solvent.
6-12
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM
Power
Steering Fluid (GM Part
Power Steering No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada
System
89021186).
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
Transaxle
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM
Secondary
Part No. U.S. 12346293, in Canada
Latch, Pivots, 992723) or lubricant meeting
Spring Anchor requirements of NLGI #2, Category
and Release LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and Door Multi-Purpose
(GM
Part
No.
U.S.
12346241, in
Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part
No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada
992887).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.2 L L4 ECOTEC™
3400 V6
25098845
25161977
A1172C
A1279C
Engine Oil Filter
2.2 L L4 ECOTEC™
3400 V6
24460713
25010792
PF2244G
PF47
Spark Plugs (Platinum Plugs)
2.2 L L4 ECOTEC™
3400 V6
25337472
12568387
41–981
41–10
Windshield Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side — 22.0 inches (56.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side — 17.0 inches (43.0 cm)
22155307
22121329
—
—
6-13
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages.
Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
6-14
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-15
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-16
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ........................................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-5
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government ....................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Pontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668). (TTY users
in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to
write to Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to
Pontiac’s Customer Assistance Center.
United States — Customer Assistance
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and
wheelchair/scooter lifts.
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or
to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Contact Pontiac’s
Roadside Assistance toll-free at 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743). Roadside Assistance Representatives are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
7-5
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle.
7-6
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Pontiac Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE
(762-3743), text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.
Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Pontiac reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Transportation Options
Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Pontiac
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Shuttle Service
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way or round trip shuttle ride to a destination up to
10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of up to a five day maximum may be
available for the use of public transportation such as a
taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses of up to a five day maximum
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original receipts.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
7-7
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of $30 a day
and must be supported by receipts. This requires that you
sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state,
local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You
are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive
mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
7-8
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. If your
vehicle is equipped with Quadrasteer, steering
performance, including yaw rate, steering wheel angle,
and lateral acceleration, is also recorded. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data.
7-9
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
7-10
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-762-2737, or write:
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Pontiac Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
7-11
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-12
A
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-80
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20
Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-19
Airbag
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-25
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9
Airbag System ................................................ 1-51
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-55
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-56
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-54
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-55
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-54
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-52
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-70
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ..... 3-70
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-6
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-28
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-71
Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-76
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-74
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-77
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-75
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-71
Finish Care ................................................. 5-75
Finish Damage ............................................ 5-77
Appearance Care (cont.)
Glass Surfaces ............................................
Instrument Panel .........................................
Interior Plastic Components ...........................
Leather ......................................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................
Vinyl ..........................................................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
Ashtrays ........................................................
Audio System(s) .............................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................
Fixed Mast Antenna .....................................
Radio with CD ............................ 3-38, 3-42,
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-77
5-76
5-77
5-78
5-73
5-74
5-74
5-75
3-18
3-37
3-68
3-69
3-69
3-70
3-70
3-53
3-37
3-37
3-67
3-69
3-70
1
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15
Automatic Transaxle
Fluid .......................................................... 5-21
Operation ................................................... 2-20
B
Battery .......................................................... 5-36
Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-18
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-22
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-6
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-23
System Warning Light .................................. 3-27
Brakes .......................................................... 5-33
Braking ........................................................... 4-5
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-15
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-42
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-44
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-43
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-42
Headlamps ................................................. 5-42
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-45
Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ............ 5-44
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-55
2
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications ............................ 5-85
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-11, 2-26, 4-25, 4-38
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-74
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-69
Your CDs ................................................... 3-69
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-30
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-44
Center Rear Passenger Position, Safety Belts ....... 1-26
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-59
Charging System Light .................................... 3-26
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-30
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-77
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-36
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-32
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-41
Older Children ............................................. 1-30
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-43
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center Rear
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside
Seat Position ...........................................
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position ...........................................
Top Strap ...................................................
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................
Where to Put the Restraint ...........................
Chime Level Adjustment ..................................
Cigarette Lighter .............................................
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ........................................
Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................................
Fabric/Carpet ..............................................
Finish Care .................................................
Glass Surfaces ............................................
Instrument Panel .........................................
Interior Plastic Components ...........................
Leather ......................................................
Tires ..........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...............................
Vinyl ..........................................................
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................
Weatherstrips ..............................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................
1-46
1-44
1-48
1-39
1-41
1-39
3-70
3-18
5-76
5-75
5-71
5-75
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-73
5-76
5-77
5-73
5-74
5-74
5-75
Climate Control System ................................... 3-19
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-21
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-27
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-70
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-29
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-19
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-30
Cooling System .............................................. 5-26
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-11
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-29
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Users ....................................................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................ 7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................ 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
3
D
E
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Headlamps ........................................ 3-15
Delayed Locking ............................................... 2-8
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-17
Door
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-8
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-14
Seat Height Adjuster ...................................... 1-3
Six-Way Power Seat ...................................... 1-3
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-16
City ........................................................... 4-20
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-2
Freeway ..................................................... 4-21
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-23
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-17
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-30
Winter ........................................................ 4-25
Easy Entry Seat ............................................... 1-6
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-80
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-83
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-80
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-81
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-80
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-80
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20
Battery ....................................................... 5-36
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-34
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-30
Coolant ...................................................... 5-22
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-19
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-29
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-26
Oil ............................................................. 5-15
Overheating ................................................ 5-24
Starting ...................................................... 2-17
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ........................ 4-8
Active Light ................................................ 3-29
Warning Light ............................................. 3-28
Entry/Exit Lighting ........................................... 3-17
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-29
4
F
G
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-77
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-70
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-60
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-61
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-69
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-21
Power Steering ........................................... 5-31
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-32
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-16
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-36
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................... 5-83
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-80
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......................... 5-81
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-80
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-29
Fuel .......................................................... 3-36
Speedometer .............................................. 3-24
Tachometer ................................................. 3-24
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-29
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-5
Headlamps ............................................ 3-14, 5-42
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-15
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-42
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15
Delayed ..................................................... 3-15
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps ............. 5-43
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-42
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9
Headlamps Off in Park (P) ............................... 3-14
Heater ........................................................... 3-19
5
Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................... 1-3
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-35
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-23
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-10
Horn ............................................................... 3-7
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-14
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-16
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-32
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-52
Instrument Panel
Brightness .................................................. 3-17
Cluster ....................................................... 3-22
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-37
6
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-3
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Labelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... 5-47
Lamps
Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-18
Dome ........................................................ 3-17
Fog ........................................................... 3-16
Trunk ......................................................... 3-18
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-41
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ........................................ 1-43
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-6
Lift Seat, Power ............................................... 1-7
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-25
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-28
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-27
Change Engine Oil ...................................... 3-34
Charging System ......................................... 3-26
Light (cont.)
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Active Light ............................................. 3-29
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-28
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-35
Low Coolant Warning ................................... 3-30
Low Washer Fluid Warning ........................... 3-35
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-30
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-34
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-25
Security ..................................................... 3-35
Service Vehicle Soon ................................... 3-35
Lighting
Entry/Exit ................................................... 3-17
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-11
Locks
Delayed Locking ........................................... 2-8
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-11
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-10
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14
Low Coolant Warning Light .............................. 3-30
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ....................... 3-35
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-8
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................... 6-9
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-14
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-13
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-8
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-12
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-30
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-28
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-29
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-28
Outside Remote Control Mirror ...................... 2-28
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
7
N
P
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-15
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-13
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-24
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-25
Park (P) Headlamps Off in Park (P) .................. 3-14
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-23
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-26
Passing ......................................................... 4-13
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-15
Power ............................................................. 1-3
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System ......................................... 5-80
Lift Seat ....................................................... 1-7
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-17
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-31
Windows .................................................... 2-14
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-8
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-24
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-24
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12
Oil
Change Engine Oil Light ............................... 3-34
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-34
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-30
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-7
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-29
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-28
Remote Control Mirror .................................. 2-28
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-8
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
8
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-13
R
Radios .......................................................... 3-37
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-69
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-69
Radio with CD ............................ 3-38, 3-42, 3-53
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-37
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-37
Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-67
Understanding Reception .............................. 3-69
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-10
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-27
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-8
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-23
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-28
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-12
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-35
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-4
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-64
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-62
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-45
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-10
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-57
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash .................................................. 1-58
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-57
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-58
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-17
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-22
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-30
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-27
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Center Rear Passenger Position ....................
Driver Position ............................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .....
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults ......................................
Rear Seat Passengers .................................
Right Front Passenger Position ......................
Safety Belt Extender ....................................
3-25
5-74
1-26
1-14
1-14
1-13
1-27
1-23
1-22
1-29
9
Safety Belts (cont.)
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-22
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ......................... 1-9
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-21
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-6
Seats
Driver Seat Height Adjuster ............................. 1-3
Easy Entry Seat ............................................ 1-6
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-2
Power Lift Seat ............................................. 1-7
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-8
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-6
Six-Way Power Driver .................................... 1-3
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-46
Designed for the LATCH System ................... 1-43
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-44
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-48
Security Light ................................................. 3-35
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ..................................................... 5-5
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-30
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
10
Service (cont.)
Vehicle Soon Light ....................................... 3-35
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-56
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ......... 3-37
Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........ 3-37
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-77
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-24
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-25
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-21
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Spare Tire
Installing .................................................... 5-64
Removing ................................................... 5-62
Storing ....................................................... 5-69
Specifications, Capacities ................................. 5-85
Speedometer .................................................. 3-24
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-17
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ......................... 3-68
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-30
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-29
Glove Box .................................................. 2-29
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-29
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-14
Sunroof ......................................................... 2-30
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-24
Taillamps
Turn Signal, and Stoplamps .......................... 5-44
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-67
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-15
Passlock® ................................................... 2-15
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7
Tires ............................................................. 5-46
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-76
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-55
Chains ....................................................... 5-59
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-61
Cleaning .................................................... 5-76
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-70
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-60
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-52
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-53
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-64
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-64
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-62
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-69
Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-47
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-49
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-56
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-57
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-57
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-54
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-39
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-41
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-35
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-38
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-35
Traction
Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .................... 4-8
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Active Light ............................................. 3-29
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
Warning Light .......................................... 3-28
Transaxle
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-21
Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-20
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-24
Trunk ............................................................ 2-11
Trunk Lamps .................................................. 3-18
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-8
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-69
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-56
11
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Service Soon Light ...................................... 3-35
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-79
Service Parts Identification Label ................... 5-79
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-21
Visors ........................................................... 2-14
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-22
Warnings
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-7
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ...................... 3-35
12
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-57
Replacement ............................................... 5-57
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-39
Windows ....................................................... 2-13
Power ........................................................ 2-14
Windshield
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-75
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-32
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-45
Fuses ........................................................ 5-80
Windshield Wiper Lever ................................... 3-10
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-25
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-70
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement